blob: a3044e124229e0bd6c6a7647a58fdf03fc7d77ea [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07007 *
8 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
9 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
10 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050016#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070017#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020022#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040024/**
25 * DOC: Introduction
26 *
27 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
28 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
29 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
30 * drivers.
31 */
32
33/**
34 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
35 *
36 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070037 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
38 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
39 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010040 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
41 * tasklet function.
42 *
43 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070044 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070045 */
46
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040047/**
48 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070049 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
51 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
52 */
53
54/**
55 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070056 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040057 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
58 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
59 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
60 * hardware.
61 *
62 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
63 *
64 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
65 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
66 *
67 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
68 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070069 */
70
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020071/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040072 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
73 *
74 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
75 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
76 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
77 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
78 *
79 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
80 * suspend.
81 *
82 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
83 *
84 */
85
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050086struct device;
87
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040088/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020089 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
90 *
91 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010092 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020093 */
94enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020095 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020097};
98
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020099#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
100
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200101/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800102 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
103 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
107 */
108enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
109 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
110 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
111 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
113};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200114#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800115
116/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400117 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
118 *
119 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100120 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400121 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400122 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200123 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
124 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400125 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100126 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300127 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200128 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400129 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700130struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200131 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100132 u16 cw_min;
133 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200134 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300135 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200136 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700137};
138
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700139struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
140 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
141 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
143 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
144};
145
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100146/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200147 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100148 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
152 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200153 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200154 */
155enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100156 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200161};
162
163/**
164 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
165 *
166 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
167 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
168 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100169 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200170 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200171 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
172 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
173 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
174 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100175 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100176 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200177 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
178 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
179 */
180struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100181 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200182 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200183
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
185
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100186 bool radar_enabled;
187
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100188 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189};
190
191/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100192 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
193 *
194 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
195 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
196 *
197 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
198 * also implies a change in the AID.
199 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
200 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300201 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700202 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200203 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200204 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200205 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
206 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
207 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
208 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
209 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
210 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200211 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200212 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300213 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200214 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
215 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200216 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200217 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200218 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300219 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200220 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100221 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
222 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300223 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
224 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100225 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
226 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
227 * context had been assigned.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100228 */
229enum ieee80211_bss_change {
230 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
231 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
232 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300233 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200234 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200235 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200236 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200237 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
238 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
239 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200240 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200241 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300242 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200243 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200244 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300245 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200246 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300247 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200248 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100249 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300250 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100251 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200252
253 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100254};
255
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300256/*
257 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
258 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
259 * filtering will be disabled.
260 */
261#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
262
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100263/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700264 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
265 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
266 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
267 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
268 */
269enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
270 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
271 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
272};
273
274/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100275 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
276 *
277 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
278 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
279 *
280 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200281 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
282 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530283 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100284 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
285 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200286 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
287 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
288 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
289 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
290 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
291 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100292 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200293 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300294 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200295 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100296 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
297 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
298 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
299 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
300 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200301 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
302 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100303 * (see @sync_tsf)
304 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
305 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700306 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800307 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200308 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
309 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
310 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300311 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100312 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200313 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
314 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100315 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
316 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100317 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200318 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200319 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
320 * implies disabled
321 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300322 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
323 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
324 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
325 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100326 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
327 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
328 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200329 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200330 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
331 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
332 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300333 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
334 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200335 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300336 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
337 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200338 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100339 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100340 */
341struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200342 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100343 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200344 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530345 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100346 u16 aid;
347 /* erp related data */
348 bool use_cts_prot;
349 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300350 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200351 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800352 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700353 u16 beacon_int;
354 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200355 u64 sync_tsf;
356 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100357 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100358 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300359 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100360 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200361 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200362 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
363 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100364 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300365 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100366 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200367 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200368 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300369 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300370 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
371 size_t ssid_len;
372 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200373 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100374 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100375};
376
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800377/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200378 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800379 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700380 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800381 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100382 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200383 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
384 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
385 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
386 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
387 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
388 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
389 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
390 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
391 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
392 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
393 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200394 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200395 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
396 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200397 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200398 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
399 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200400 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200401 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200402 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
403 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
404 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
405 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
406 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
407 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
408 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
409 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200410 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
411 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
412 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300413 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
414 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200415 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
416 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
417 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600418 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
419 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
420 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100421 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
422 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
423 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200424 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
425 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200426 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
427 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100428 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
429 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
430 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200431 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
432 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
433 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
434 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100435 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
436 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
437 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100438 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
439 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
440 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200441 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
442 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
443 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400444 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200445 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
446 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100447 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
448 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
449 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
450 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200451 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
452 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
453 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530454 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
455 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
456 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200457 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
458 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
459 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200460 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
461 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530462 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
463 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
464 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200465 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
466 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
467 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200468 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
469 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200470 *
471 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
472 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800473 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200474enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200475 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200476 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
477 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
478 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
479 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
480 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
481 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
482 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
483 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
484 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
485 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
486 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
487 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600488 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100489 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200490 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200491 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100492 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200493 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100494 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100495 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200496 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400497 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200498 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100499 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200500 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530501 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200502 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530503 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200504 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200505 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200506};
507
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200508#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
509
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200510/**
511 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
512 *
513 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
514 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
515 *
516 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
517 */
518enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
520};
521
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200522/*
523 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
524 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
525 */
526#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
527 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
528 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
529 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
530 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200533 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200534
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530535/**
536 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
537 * Rate Control algorithm.
538 *
539 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
540 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
541 *
542 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
543 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
544 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
545 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
546 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100547 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
548 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530549 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
550 * Greenfield mode.
551 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100552 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
553 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
554 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530555 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
556 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
557 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
558 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
559 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200560enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
561 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
562 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
563 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
564
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100565 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200566 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
567 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
568 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
569 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
570 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100571 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
572 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
573 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800574};
575
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200576
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200577/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
578#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200579
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200580/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
581#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
582
583/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200584#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200585
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200586/* maximum number of rate table entries */
587#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
588
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200589/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200590 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200591 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200592 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
593 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200594 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200595 *
596 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
597 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
598 *
599 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
600 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200601 *
602 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
603 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
604 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
605 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
606 * information
607 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
608 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
609 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
610 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
611 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
612 * information should then contain
613 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
614 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
615 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200616 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200617struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
618 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100619 u16 count:5,
620 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000621} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200622
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100623#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
624
625static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
626 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
627{
628 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200629 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
630 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100631}
632
633static inline u8
634ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
635{
636 return rate->idx & 0xF;
637}
638
639static inline u8
640ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
641{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200642 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100643}
644
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200645/**
646 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200647 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200648 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
649 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
650 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
651 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
652 *
653 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200654 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200655 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100656 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700657 * @control: union for control data
658 * @status: union for status data
659 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100660 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700661 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100662 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700663 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200664 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200665 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200666struct ieee80211_tx_info {
667 /* common information */
668 u32 flags;
669 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200670
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200671 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100672
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100673 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100674
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200675 union {
676 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200677 union {
678 /* rate control */
679 struct {
680 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
681 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
682 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200683 u8 use_rts:1;
684 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200685 u8 short_preamble:1;
686 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200687 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200688 };
689 /* only needed before rate control */
690 unsigned long jiffies;
691 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200692 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
694 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200695 u32 flags;
696 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200697 } control;
698 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200699 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200700 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200701 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100702 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200703 u8 antenna;
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200704 void *status_driver_data[21 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200705 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200706 struct {
707 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
708 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200709 u8 pad[4];
710
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200711 void *rate_driver_data[
712 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
713 };
714 void *driver_data[
715 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200716 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700717};
718
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300719/**
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -0700720 * struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies - scheduled scan IEs
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300721 *
722 * This structure is used to pass the appropriate IEs to be used in scheduled
723 * scans for all bands. It contains both the IEs passed from the userspace
724 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
725 *
726 * @ie: array with the IEs for each supported band
727 * @len: array with the total length of the IEs for each band
728 */
729struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies {
730 u8 *ie[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
731 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
732};
733
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200734static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
735{
736 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
737}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400738
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200739static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
740{
741 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
742}
743
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200744/**
745 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
746 *
747 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
748 *
749 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
750 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
751 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
752 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
753 *
754 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
755 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
756 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
757 */
758static inline void
759ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
760{
761 int i;
762
763 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
764 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
765 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
766 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
767 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
768 /* clear the rate counts */
769 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
770 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
771
772 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200773 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
775 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
776 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
777}
778
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400779
780/**
781 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
782 *
783 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
784 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
785 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
786 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400787 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
788 * verification has been done by the hardware.
789 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
790 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
791 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400792 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
793 * the frame.
794 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
795 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800796 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100797 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
798 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
799 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800800 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
801 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
802 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200803 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200804 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100805 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200806 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
807 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100808 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
809 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200810 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
811 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
812 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200813 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
814 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
815 * each A-MPDU
816 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
817 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
818 * monitoring purposes only
819 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
820 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
821 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
822 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
823 * on this subframe
824 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
825 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200826 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200827 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200828 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
829 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200830 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
831 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
832 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
833 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
834 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
835 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
836 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
837 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
838 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400839 */
840enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200841 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
842 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
843 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
844 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
845 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
846 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800847 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200848 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
849 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
850 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
851 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
852 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
853 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
854 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
855 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
856 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
857 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
858 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
859 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
860 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800861 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100862 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200863 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200864 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200865 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
866 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200867 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400868};
869
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200870#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
871
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400872/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200873 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
874 *
875 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
876 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
877 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
878 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
879 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200880 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200881 */
882enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
883 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
884 RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(1),
885 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200886 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(3),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200887};
888
889/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400890 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
891 *
892 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
893 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200894 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200895 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900896 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
897 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200898 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
899 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100900 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400901 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200902 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
903 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
904 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200905 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
906 * values were filled.
907 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
908 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400909 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200910 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100911 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
912 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400913 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200914 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200915 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200916 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
917 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
918 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400919 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700920struct ieee80211_rx_status {
921 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200922 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200923 u32 ampdu_reference;
924 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200925 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200926 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200927 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100928 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200929 u8 rx_flags;
930 u8 band;
931 u8 antenna;
932 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200933 u8 chains;
934 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200935 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700936};
937
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400938/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400939 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
940 *
941 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
942 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100943 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
944 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
945 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +0200946 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
947 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
948 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
949 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
950 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
951 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
952 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200953 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
954 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
955 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
956 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
957 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200958 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
959 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400960 */
961enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100962 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +0200963 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200964 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200965 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400966};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700967
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200968
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700969/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200970 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
971 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200972 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100973 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200974 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200975 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +0100976 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +0200977 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200978 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100979 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200980 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
981 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200982 */
983enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100984 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200985 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100986 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200987 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200988 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
989 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
990 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200991 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200992};
993
994/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100995 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
996 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200997 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
998 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
999 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1000 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1001 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001002 */
1003enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1004 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1005 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1006 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1007 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1008
1009 /* keep last */
1010 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1011};
1012
1013/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001014 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1015 *
1016 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1017 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001018 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1019 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001020 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001021 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001022 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1023 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1024 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1025 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001026 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1027 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1028 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001029 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1030 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1031 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1032 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001033 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1034 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001035 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001036 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001037 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001038 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001039 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001040 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1041 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001042 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001043 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1044 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001045 *
1046 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1047 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001048 * configured for an HT channel.
1049 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1050 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001051 */
1052struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001053 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001054 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001055 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001056
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001057 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001058 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001059
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001060 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1061
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001062 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001063 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001064 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001065};
1066
1067/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001068 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1069 *
1070 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1071 * operation.
1072 *
1073 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1074 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1075 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1076 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1077 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1078 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001079 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001080 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1081 */
1082struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1083 u64 timestamp;
1084 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001085 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001086 u8 count;
1087};
1088
1089/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001090 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1091 *
1092 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1093 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001094 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1095 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1096 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1097 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001098 */
1099enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1100 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001101 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001102};
1103
1104/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001105 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1106 *
1107 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1108 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1109 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001110 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001111 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1112 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001113 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001114 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1115 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001116 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001117 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1118 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1119 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1120 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001121 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1122 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001123 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1124 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1125 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1126 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1127 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001128 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001129 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001130 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001131 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1132 * sizeof(void *).
1133 */
1134struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001135 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001136 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001137 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001138 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001139 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001140
1141 u8 cab_queue;
1142 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1143
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001144 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1145
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001146 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001147
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001148#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1149 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1150#endif
1151
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001152 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001153 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001154};
1155
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001156static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1157{
1158#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001159 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001160#endif
1161 return false;
1162}
1163
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001164/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001165 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1166 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1167 *
1168 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1169 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1170 *
1171 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1172 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1173 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1174 */
1175struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1176
1177/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001178 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1179 *
1180 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1181 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1182 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001183 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1184 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1185 * particular key.
1186 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1187 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1188 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001189 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1190 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001191 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001192 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1193 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001194 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001195 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001196 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1197 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001198 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1199 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1200 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1201 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1202 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1203 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1204 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001205 */
1206enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001207 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = 1<<1,
1208 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC= 1<<2,
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001209 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = 1<<3,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001210 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = 1<<4,
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001211 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = 1<<5,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001212 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001213};
1214
1215/**
1216 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1217 *
1218 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1219 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1220 *
1221 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1222 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001223 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001224 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001225 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1226 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1227 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001228 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1229 * data block:
1230 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1231 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1232 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001233 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1234 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001235 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001236struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001237 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001238 u8 icv_len;
1239 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001240 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001241 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001242 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001243 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001244 u8 key[0];
1245};
1246
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001247/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001248 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1249 *
1250 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1251 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1252 *
1253 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1254 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1255 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1256 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1257 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1258 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1259 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1260 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1261 * key_idx value calculation:
1262 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1263 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1264 */
1265struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1266 u32 cipher;
1267 u16 iftype;
1268 u8 hdr_len;
1269 u8 pn_len;
1270 u8 pn_off;
1271 u8 key_idx_off;
1272 u8 key_idx_mask;
1273 u8 key_idx_shift;
1274 u8 mic_len;
1275};
1276
1277/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001278 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1279 *
1280 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1281 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1282 *
1283 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1284 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1285 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001286enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001287 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001288};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001289
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001290/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001291 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1292 *
1293 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1294 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1295 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1296 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1297 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1298 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1299 */
1300enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1301 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1302 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1303 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1304 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1305 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1306 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1307};
1308
1309/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001310 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1311 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1312 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1313 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1314 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1315 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1316 *
1317 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1318 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1319 */
1320enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1321 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1322 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1323 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1324 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1325};
1326
1327/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001328 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1329 *
1330 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001331 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001332 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1333 */
1334struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1335 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1336 struct {
1337 s8 idx;
1338 u8 count;
1339 u8 count_cts;
1340 u8 count_rts;
1341 u16 flags;
1342 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1343};
1344
1345/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001346 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1347 *
1348 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1349 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1350 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1351 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1352 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001353 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001354 *
1355 * @addr: MAC address
1356 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001357 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001358 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1359 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001360 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports WME. Only valid during AP-mode.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001361 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1362 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001363 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1364 * if wme is supported.
1365 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001366 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001367 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1368 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1369 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1370 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001371 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001372 * @rates: rate control selection table
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001373 */
1374struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001375 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001376 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1377 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001378 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001379 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001380 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001381 u8 uapsd_queues;
1382 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001383 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001384 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001385 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001386 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001387
1388 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001389 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001390};
1391
1392/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001393 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1394 *
1395 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301396 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001397 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001398 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1399 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1400 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001401enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001402 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1403};
1404
1405/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001406 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1407 *
1408 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1409 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1410 */
1411struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1412 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1413};
1414
1415/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001416 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1417 *
1418 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1419 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1420 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1421 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1422 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1423 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001424 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1425 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1426 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1427 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1428 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1429 * algorithm.
1430 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1431 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1432 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1433 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1434 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1435 * CCK frames.
1436 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001437 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1438 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1439 * the FCS at the end.
1440 *
1441 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1442 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1443 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1444 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1445 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1446 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001447 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001448 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001449 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1450 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1451 *
1452 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1453 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1454 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001455 *
1456 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1457 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1458 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1459 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1460 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001461 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1462 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1463 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1464 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1465 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001466 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1467 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1468 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301469 *
1470 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1471 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001472 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001473 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1474 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1475 *
1476 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1477 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1478 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1479 *
1480 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1481 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001482 *
1483 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1484 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001485 *
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001486 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS:
1487 * Hardware supports static spatial multiplexing powersave,
1488 * ie. can turn off all but one chain even on HT connections
1489 * that should be using more chains.
1490 *
1491 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS:
1492 * Hardware supports dynamic spatial multiplexing powersave,
1493 * ie. can turn off all but one chain and then wake the rest
1494 * up as required after, for example, rts/cts handshake.
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001495 *
1496 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1497 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1498 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1499 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301500 *
1501 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1502 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1503 * the stack.
1504 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001505 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001506 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1507 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001508 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001509 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1510 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1511 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001512 *
1513 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1514 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1515 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1516 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1517 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1518 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001519 *
1520 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1521 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1522 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1523 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1524 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1525 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001526 *
1527 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1528 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1529 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001530 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001531 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1532 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1533 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001534 *
1535 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1536 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1537 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1538 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001539 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001540 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1541 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1542 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001543 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1544 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1545 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001546 *
1547 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1548 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001549 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001550 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1551 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1552 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1553 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001554 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1555 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1556 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1557 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001558 *
1559 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANGE_RUNNING_CHANCTX: The hardware can change a
1560 * channel context on-the-fly. This is needed for channel switch
1561 * on single-channel hardware. It can also be used as an
1562 * optimization in certain channel switch cases with
1563 * multi-channel.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001564 */
1565enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001566 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001567 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1568 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001569 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1570 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001571 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001572 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001573 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001574 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1575 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1576 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1577 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1578 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1579 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001580 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001581 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS = 1<<15,
1582 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS = 1<<16,
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001583 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301584 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001585 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001586 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001587 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001588 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001589 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001590 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001591 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001592 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001593 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001594 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001595 IEEE80211_HW_CHANGE_RUNNING_CHANCTX = 1<<29,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001596};
1597
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001598/**
1599 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001600 *
1601 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1602 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1603 *
1604 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1605 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1606 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001607 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1608 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001609 *
1610 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1611 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001612 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1613 * along with this structure.
1614 *
1615 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1616 *
1617 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1618 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1619 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001620 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1621 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001622 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001623 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001624 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001625 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001626 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001627 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001628 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001629 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001630 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1631 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1632 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001633 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1634 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1635 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001636 *
1637 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1638 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001639 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1640 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001641 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1642 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001643 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001644 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1645 * can handle.
1646 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1647 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001648 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001649 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001650 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1651 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1652 * aggregation.
1653 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1654 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1655 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001656 *
1657 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1658 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1659 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001660 *
1661 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1662 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001663 *
1664 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1665 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1666 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1667 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001668 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001669 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1670 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1671 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1672 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001673 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1674 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1675 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001676 *
1677 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1678 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1679 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1680 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1681 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1682 * neither enabled.
1683 *
1684 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1685 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1686 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001687 *
1688 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1689 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1690 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001691 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001692struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001693 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001694 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001695 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001696 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001697 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001698 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001699 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001700 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001701 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001702 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001703 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001704 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001705 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001706 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001707 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001708 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001709 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001710 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001711 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001712 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001713 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001714 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001715 u8 uapsd_queues;
1716 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001717 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1718 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001719};
1720
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001721/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001722 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1723 *
1724 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1725 *
1726 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1727 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1728 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1729 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1730 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001731 *
1732 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001733 */
1734struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1735
1736/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001737 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1738 *
1739 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1740 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1741 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001742static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1743{
1744 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1745}
1746
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001747/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001748 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001749 *
1750 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1751 * @addr: the address to set
1752 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001753static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1754{
1755 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1756}
1757
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001758static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1759ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001760 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001761{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001762 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001763 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001764 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001765}
1766
1767static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1768ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001769 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001770{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001771 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001772 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001773 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001774}
1775
1776static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1777ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001778 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001779{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001780 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001781 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001782 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001783}
1784
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001785/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001786 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1787 * @hw: the hardware
1788 * @skb: the skb
1789 *
1790 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1791 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1792 */
1793void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1794
1795/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001796 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001797 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001798 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1799 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1800 *
1801 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1802 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001803 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1804 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1805 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001806 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1807 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1808 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001809 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1810 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1811 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1812 *
1813 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1814 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1815 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1816 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1817 *
1818 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1819 *
1820 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1821 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1822 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1823 * based on the receive flags.
1824 *
1825 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1826 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1827 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1828 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001829 *
1830 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1831 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1832 * handler.
1833 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001834 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001835 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1836 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001837 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001838 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001839 *
1840 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1841 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1842 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001843 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001844
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001845/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001846 * DOC: Powersave support
1847 *
1848 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1849 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001850 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1851 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1852 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1853 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1854 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1855 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1856 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1857 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001858 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001859 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1860 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1861 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001862 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1863 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001864 *
1865 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1866 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1867 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001868 *
1869 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1870 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1871 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1872 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001873 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1874 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001875 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001876 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001877 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1878 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1879 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1880 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1881 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1882 * periods.
1883 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001884 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001885 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1886 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1887 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1888 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1889 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1890 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1891 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1892 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1893 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1894 *
1895 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1896 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09001897 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001898 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1899 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1900 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1901 *
1902 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1903 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001904 */
1905
1906/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001907 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1908 *
1909 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08001910 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001911 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1912 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1913 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1914 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1915 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1916 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001917 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1918 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001919 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1920 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1921 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1922 *
1923 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1924 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1925 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1926 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1927 *
1928 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1929 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1930 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
1931 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
1932 * - a list of information element IDs
1933 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
1934 *
1935 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
1936 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
1937 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
1938 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
1939 * vendor information elements.
1940 *
1941 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
1942 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
1943 *
1944 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
1945 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
1946 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
1947 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
1948 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
1949 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
1950 *
1951 *
1952 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
1953 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
1954 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
1955 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
1956 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
1957 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
1958 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
1959 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
1960 *
1961 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
1962 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
1963 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001964 */
1965
1966/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001967 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
1968 *
1969 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
1970 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
1971 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
1972 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
1973 *
1974 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
1975 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
1976 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
1977 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
1978 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
1979 * hardware flags.
1980 *
1981 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
1982 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
1983 * turned off otherwise.
1984 *
1985 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
1986 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
1987 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
1988 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
1989 */
1990
1991/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001992 * DOC: Frame filtering
1993 *
1994 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
1995 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
1996 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
1997 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
1998 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
1999 *
2000 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2001 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2002 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2003 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002004 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2005 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2006 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2007 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2008 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2009 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2010 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002011 *
2012 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2013 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2014 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2015 * or dropped.
2016 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002017 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2018 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2019 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2020 * the flag, but not clear it.
2021 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2022 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2023 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2024 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2025 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2026 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2027 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2028 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002029 */
2030
2031/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002032 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2033 *
2034 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2035 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2036 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2037 *
2038 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2039 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2040 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2041 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2042 * the driver code.
2043 *
2044 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2045 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2046 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2047 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2048 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2049 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2050 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2051 *
2052 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2053 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2054 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2055 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2056 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2057 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2058 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2059 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2060 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2061 * @sta_notify callback.
2062 *
2063 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2064 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2065 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2066 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2067 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2068 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2069 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002070 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002071 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2072 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2073 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2074 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2075 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2076 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2077 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002078 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2079 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2080 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002081 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2082 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2083 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2084 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2085 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2086 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2087 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2088 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2089 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2090 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2091 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2092 *
2093 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2094 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2095 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2096 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2097 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2098 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2099 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2100 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2101 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2102 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002103 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002104 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2105 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2106 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2107 *
2108 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2109 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2110 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2111 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2112 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002113 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002114 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2115 *
2116 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2117 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2118 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2119 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002120 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002121 *
2122 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2123 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2124 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2125 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002126 */
2127
2128/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002129 * DOC: HW queue control
2130 *
2131 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2132 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2133 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2134 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2135 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2136 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2137 *
2138 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2139 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2140 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2141 *
2142 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2143 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2144 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2145 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2146 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2147 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2148 * the hardware queue.
2149 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2150 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2151 *
2152 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2153 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2154 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2155 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2156 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2157 *
2158 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2159 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2160 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2161 * off-channel queue: 9
2162 *
2163 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2164 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2165 *
2166 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2167 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2168 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2169 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2170 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2171 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2172 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2173 *
2174 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2175 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2176 *
2177 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2178 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2179 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2180 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2181 */
2182
2183/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002184 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2185 *
2186 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2187 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2188 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2189 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2190 *
2191 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2192 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2193 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2194 *
2195 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2196 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2197 * multicast address.
2198 *
2199 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2200 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2201 *
2202 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2203 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2204 *
2205 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2206 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2207 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2208 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2209 * honour this flag if possible.
2210 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002211 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002212 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002213 *
2214 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002215 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002216 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2217 * those addressed to this station.
2218 *
2219 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002220 */
2221enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2222 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2223 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2224 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2225 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2226 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2227 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2228 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002229 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002230 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002231};
2232
2233/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002234 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2235 *
2236 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2237 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002238 *
2239 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2240 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002241 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002242 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2243 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002244 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2245 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2246 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002247 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002248 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2249 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2250 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2251 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2252 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2253 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2254 * session is gone and removes the station.
2255 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2256 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2257 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2258 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002259 */
2260enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2261 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2262 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002263 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002264 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2265 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2266 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002267 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002268};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002269
2270/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002271 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2272 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002273 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2274 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002275 */
2276enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2277 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002278 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002279};
2280
2281/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002282 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2283 *
2284 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002285 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2286 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2287 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002288 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002289 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2290 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2291 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002292 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2293 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002294 */
2295enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2296 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2297 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002298 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002299 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002300};
2301
2302/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002303 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2304 *
2305 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2306 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2307 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2308 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2309 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2310 *
2311 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2312 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2313 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2314 */
2315enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2316 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2317 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2318};
2319
2320/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002321 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2322 *
2323 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2324 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2325 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2326 *
2327 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2328 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2329 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002330 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002331 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002332 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002333 *
2334 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2335 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2336 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2337 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2338 * or zero.
2339 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2340 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2341 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002342 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002343 *
2344 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2345 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2346 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2347 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002348 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2349 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002350 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002351 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002352 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2353 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2354 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2355 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2356 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002357 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2358 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2359 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2360 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002361 *
2362 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2363 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2364 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2365 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2366 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2367 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002368 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2369 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2370 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2371 * in suspend().
2372 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002373 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002374 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002375 * and @stop must be implemented.
2376 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2377 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2378 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2379 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2380 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002381 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002382 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002383 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2384 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2385 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2386 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2387 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2388 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002389 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2390 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2391 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2392 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2393 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2394 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2395 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002396 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002397 *
2398 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2399 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002400 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002401 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002402 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002403 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2404 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2405 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2406 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2407 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002408 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2409 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002410 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002411 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2412 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2413 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2414 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002415 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2416 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002417 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002418 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002419 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002420 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002421 *
2422 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002423 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2424 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002425 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002426 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002427 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002428 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002429 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2430 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2431 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002432 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002433 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002434 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2435 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2436 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2437 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2438 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2439 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002440 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2441 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2442 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2443 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002444 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002445 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002446 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2447 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002448 * that power save is disabled.
2449 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2450 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2451 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2452 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2453 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2454 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2455 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002456 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002457 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002458 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2459 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2460 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2461 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2462 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2463 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2464 * The callback can sleep.
2465 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002466 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2467 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2468 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2469 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2470 *
2471 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002472 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002473 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002474 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2475 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002476 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002477 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002478 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2479 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2480 * this notification.
2481 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002482 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002483 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2484 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002485 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002486 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002487 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2488 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2489 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002490 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002491 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002492 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2493 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2494 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2495 * The callback can sleep.
2496 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002497 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002498 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002499 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002500 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2501 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2502 *
2503 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002504 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2505 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2506 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2507 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2508 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002509 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302510 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2511 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2512 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2513 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2514 *
2515 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2516 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2517 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002518 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002519 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2520 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2521 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002522 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002523 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2524 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2525 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2526 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002527 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2528 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2529 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2530 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2531 * The callback can sleep.
2532 *
2533 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2534 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2535 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2536 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2537 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002538 * The callback can sleep.
2539 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002540 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2541 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2542 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2543 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2544 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2545 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2546 * Must be atomic.
2547 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002548 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002549 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002550 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002551 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002552 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002553 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002554 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002555 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002556 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002557 *
2558 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002559 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002560 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002561 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002562 *
2563 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2564 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2565 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2566 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002567 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002568 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002569 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2570 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2571 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002572 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002573 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002574 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002575 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2576 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2577 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2578 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002579 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002580 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002581 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2582 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002583 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2584 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2585 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2586 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2587 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2588 * - TX: 1.....7
2589 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2590 * - TX: 8..1...
2591 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2592 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2593 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2594 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2595 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002596 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002597 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002598 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002599 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2600 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002601 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2602 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2603 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002604 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002605 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002606 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2607 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
2608 * accordingly. This callback is not required and may sleep.
2609 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002610 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2611 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002612 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002613 *
2614 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002615 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2616 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2617 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2618 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002619 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002620 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002621 *
2622 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2623 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2624 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2625 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002626 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002627 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2628 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2629 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2630 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2631 *
2632 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002633 *
2634 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2635 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2636 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2637 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2638 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2639 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002640 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002641 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2642 * must be accepted in this case.
2643 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002644 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2645 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002646 *
2647 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2648 *
2649 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302650 *
2651 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2652 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302653 *
2654 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2655 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2656 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002657 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2658 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002659 *
2660 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2661 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2662 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2663 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002664 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002665 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2666 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2667 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2668 * more-data bit must always be set.
2669 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2670 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002671 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2672 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2673 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2674 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2675 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2676 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002677 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2678 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2679 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002680 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2681 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002682 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002683 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002684 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002685 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2686 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2687 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002688 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002689 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2690 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2691 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2692 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002693 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002694 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002695 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2696 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2697 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002698 *
2699 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2700 *
2701 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2702 *
2703 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2704 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2705 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002706 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2707 * and can sleep.
2708 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002709 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2710 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2711 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2712 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2713 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2714 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2715 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2716 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2717 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2718 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2719 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2720 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002721 *
2722 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2723 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2724 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2725 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2726 * channel context with different settings
2727 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2728 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2729 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2730 * unbound from vif.
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002731 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2732 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2733 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2734 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2735 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2736 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2737 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002738 *
2739 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2740 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002741 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2742 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2743 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2744 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002745 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2746 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2747 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002748 *
2749 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2750 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2751 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002752 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002753 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2754 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002755 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002756 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002757 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2758 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002759 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002760 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2761 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2762 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2763 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002764 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002765struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002766 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2767 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2768 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002769 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002770 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002771#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2772 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2773 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002774 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002775#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002776 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002777 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002778 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2779 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002780 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002781 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002782 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002783 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002784 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2785 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2786 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2787 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002788
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002789 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2790 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2791
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002792 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002793 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002794 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2795 unsigned int changed_flags,
2796 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002797 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002798 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2799 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002800 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04002802 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002803 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01002804 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2805 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2806 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2807 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002808 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2809 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2810 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002811 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02002813 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01002814 struct cfg80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002815 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2816 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002817 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2818 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2819 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
2820 struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002821 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002822 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002823 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2824 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002825 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2826 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002827 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2828 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002829 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002830 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002831 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2832 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2833 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2834 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302835#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2836 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2837 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2838 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2839 struct dentry *dir);
2840 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2841 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2842 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2843 struct dentry *dir);
2844#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002845 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002846 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002847 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2848 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2849 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2850 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002851 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2853 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002854 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2855 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2856 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2857 u32 changed);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02002858 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02002859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002860 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03002861 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2862 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2863 u64 tsf);
2864 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002865 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002866 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01002867 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002868 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002869 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2870 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02002871 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2872 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002873 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002874 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002875#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002876 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2877 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002878 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2879 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2880 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002881#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002882 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2883 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002884 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2885 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09002886 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2887 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002888
2889 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02002890 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002891 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002892 int duration,
2893 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002894 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002895 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2896 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2897 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302898 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302899 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2900 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002901 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02002902 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002903 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002904
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002905 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2906 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2907 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2908 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2909 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002910 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2911 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2912 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2913 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2914 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002915
2916 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2917 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
2918 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2919 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2920 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
2921 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2922 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2923 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002924 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2925 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002926
2927 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2928 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002929
2930 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2931 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2932 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2933 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2934 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2935 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
2936 u32 changed);
2937 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2939 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2940 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2941 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2942 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002943
2944 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002945
2946#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
2947 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2948 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2949 struct inet6_dev *idev);
2950#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002951 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2952 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2953 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002954
2955 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2956 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002957};
2958
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002959/**
2960 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
2961 *
2962 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
2963 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
2964 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
2965 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
2966 * @priv_data_len.
2967 *
2968 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
2969 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002970 *
2971 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002972 */
2973struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
2974 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops);
2975
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002976/**
2977 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
2978 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01002979 * You must call this function before any other functions in
2980 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
2981 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002982 *
2983 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002984 *
2985 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002986 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002987int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2988
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01002989/**
2990 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
2991 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
2992 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
2993 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
2994 */
2995struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
2996 int throughput;
2997 int blink_time;
2998};
2999
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003000/**
3001 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3002 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3003 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3004 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3005 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3006 */
3007enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3008 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3009 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3010 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3011};
3012
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003013#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003014char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3015char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3016char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3017char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3018char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3019 unsigned int flags,
3020 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3021 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003022#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003023/**
3024 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3025 *
3026 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3027 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3028 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3029 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3030 *
3031 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003032 *
3033 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003034 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003035static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3036{
3037#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3038 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3039#else
3040 return NULL;
3041#endif
3042}
3043
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003044/**
3045 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3046 *
3047 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3048 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3049 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3050 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3051 *
3052 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003053 *
3054 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003055 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003056static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3057{
3058#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3059 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3060#else
3061 return NULL;
3062#endif
3063}
3064
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003065/**
3066 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3067 *
3068 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3069 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3070 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3071 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3072 *
3073 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003074 *
3075 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003076 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003077static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3078{
3079#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3080 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3081#else
3082 return NULL;
3083#endif
3084}
3085
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003086/**
3087 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3088 *
3089 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3090 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3091 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3092 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3093 *
3094 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003095 *
3096 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003097 */
3098static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3099{
3100#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3101 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3102#else
3103 return NULL;
3104#endif
3105}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003106
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003107/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003108 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3109 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003110 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003111 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3112 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3113 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003114 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3115 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3116 *
3117 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003118 */
3119static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003120ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003121 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3122 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3123{
3124#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003125 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003126 blink_table_len);
3127#else
3128 return NULL;
3129#endif
3130}
3131
3132/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003133 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3134 *
3135 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3136 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3137 *
3138 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3139 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003140void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3141
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003142/**
3143 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3144 *
3145 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3146 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003147 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003148 *
3149 * @hw: the hardware to free
3150 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003151void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3152
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003153/**
3154 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3155 *
3156 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3157 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3158 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3159 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3160 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3161 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3162 *
3163 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3164 */
3165void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3166
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003167/**
3168 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3169 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3170 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3171 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3172 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3173 * @poll: poll function
3174 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003175 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003176 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003177 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003178void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3179 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3180 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3181 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003182
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003183/**
3184 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3185 *
3186 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003187 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3188 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3189 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3190 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003191 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003192 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003193 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3194 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003195 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3196 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003197 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003198 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003199 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003200 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3201 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003202 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003203void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003204
3205/**
3206 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3207 *
3208 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003209 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3210 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003211 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003212 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3213 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003214 *
3215 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3216 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003217 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003218void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003219
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003220/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003221 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3222 *
3223 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3224 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3225 *
3226 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003227 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3228 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003229 *
3230 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3231 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3232 */
3233static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3234 struct sk_buff *skb)
3235{
3236 local_bh_disable();
3237 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3238 local_bh_enable();
3239}
3240
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003241/**
3242 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3243 *
3244 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3245 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3246 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3247 *
3248 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3249 *
3250 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3251 * each other.
3252 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003253 * @sta: currently connected sta
3254 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003255 *
3256 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003257 */
3258int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3259
3260/**
3261 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3262 * (in process context)
3263 *
3264 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3265 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3266 * applies.
3267 *
3268 * @sta: currently connected sta
3269 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003270 *
3271 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003272 */
3273static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3274 bool start)
3275{
3276 int ret;
3277
3278 local_bh_disable();
3279 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3280 local_bh_enable();
3281
3282 return ret;
3283}
3284
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003285/*
3286 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3287 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3288 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003289#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003290
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003291/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003292 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003293 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003294 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3295 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003296 *
3297 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003298 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3299 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003300 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003301 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3302 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3303 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3304 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3305 *
3306 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3307 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3308 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3309 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3310 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3311 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3312 *
3313 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3314 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3315 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3316 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3317 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003318 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003319void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3320 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003321
3322/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003323 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3324 *
3325 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3326 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3327 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3328 *
3329 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3330 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3331 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3332 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3333 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3334 */
3335void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3336 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3337 struct sk_buff *skb,
3338 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3339 int max_rates);
3340
3341/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003342 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3343 *
3344 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3345 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3346 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3347 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003348 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3349 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003350 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003351 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3352 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003353 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003354 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3355 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003356 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003357void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003358 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003359
3360/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003361 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3362 *
3363 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3364 *
3365 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3366 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3367 * for a single hardware.
3368 *
3369 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3370 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3371 */
3372static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3373 struct sk_buff *skb)
3374{
3375 local_bh_disable();
3376 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3377 local_bh_enable();
3378}
3379
3380/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003381 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003382 *
3383 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3384 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3385 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003386 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3387 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003388 *
3389 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3390 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003391 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003392void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003393 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003394
3395/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003396 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3397 *
3398 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3399 * connected STA.
3400 *
3401 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3402 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3403 */
3404void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3405
3406/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003407 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3408 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003409 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003410 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3411 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3412 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3413 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3414 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3415 *
3416 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3417 * obtain the beacon frame/template.
3418 *
3419 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3420 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
3421 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function
3422 * before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
3423 *
3424 * If the beacon frames are generated by the device, then the driver
3425 * must use the returned beacon as the template and change the TIM IE
3426 * according to the current DTIM parameters/TIM bitmap.
3427 *
3428 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003429 *
3430 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003431 */
3432struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3433 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3434 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3435
3436/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003437 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3438 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003439 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003440 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003441 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003442 *
3443 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003444 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003445static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3446 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3447{
3448 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3449}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003450
3451/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003452 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3453 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3454 *
3455 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003456 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003457 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3458 */
3459void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3460
3461/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003462 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003463 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3464 *
3465 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3466 */
3467bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3468
3469
3470/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003471 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3472 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3473 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3474 *
3475 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3476 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3477 *
3478 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003479 *
3480 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003481 */
3482struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3483 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3484
3485/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003486 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3487 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3488 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3489 *
3490 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3491 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3492 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3493 *
3494 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3495 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003496 *
3497 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003498 */
3499struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3501
3502/**
3503 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3504 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3505 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3506 *
3507 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3508 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3509 * BSSID and address is used.
3510 *
3511 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3512 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003513 *
3514 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003515 */
3516struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3518
3519/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003520 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3521 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3522 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3523 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3524 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003525 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003526 *
3527 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3528 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003529 *
3530 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003531 */
3532struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3533 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3534 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003535 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003536
3537/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003538 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3539 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003540 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003541 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3542 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003543 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003544 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3545 *
3546 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3547 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3548 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3549 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3550 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003551void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003552 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003553 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003554 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3555
3556/**
3557 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3558 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003559 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003560 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003561 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003562 *
3563 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3564 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3565 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003566 *
3567 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003568 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003569__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3570 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003571 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003572
3573/**
3574 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3575 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003576 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003577 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3578 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003579 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003580 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3581 *
3582 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3583 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3584 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3585 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3586 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003587void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003589 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003590 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003591 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3592
3593/**
3594 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3595 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003596 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003597 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003598 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003599 *
3600 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3601 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3602 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003603 *
3604 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003605 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003606__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003608 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003609 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003610
3611/**
3612 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3613 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003614 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003615 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003616 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003617 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003618 *
3619 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3620 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003621 *
3622 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003623 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003624__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3625 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003626 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003627 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003628 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003629
3630/**
3631 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3632 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003633 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003634 *
3635 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3636 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3637 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3638 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003639 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3640 *
3641 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3642 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003643 *
3644 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3645 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3646 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3647 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3648 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3649 * use common code for all beacons.
3650 */
3651struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003652ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003653
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003654/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003655 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3656 *
3657 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3658 *
3659 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3660 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3661 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3662 */
3663void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3664 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3665
3666/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003667 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003668 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003669 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3670 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003671 *
3672 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003673 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3674 * with this P1K
3675 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003676 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003677static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3678 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3679{
3680 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3681 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3682 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3683
3684 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3685}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003686
3687/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02003688 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3689 *
3690 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3691 * and transmitter address.
3692 *
3693 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3694 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3695 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3696 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3697 */
3698void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3699 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3700
3701/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003702 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3703 *
3704 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3705 * in the packet.
3706 *
3707 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3708 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3709 * encrypted with this key
3710 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3711 */
3712void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3713 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003714
3715/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03003716 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3717 *
3718 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3719 * previously installed master key.
3720 *
3721 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3722 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3723 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3724 */
3725void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3726 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3727
3728/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02003729 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3730 *
3731 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3732 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3733 * reverse order than in packet)
3734 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3735 * reverse order than in packet)
3736 */
3737struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3738 union {
3739 struct {
3740 u32 iv32;
3741 u16 iv16;
3742 } tkip;
3743 struct {
3744 u8 pn[6];
3745 } ccmp;
3746 struct {
3747 u8 pn[6];
3748 } aes_cmac;
3749 };
3750};
3751
3752/**
3753 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3754 *
3755 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3756 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3757 *
3758 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3759 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3760 * offloaded to the device.
3761 *
3762 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3763 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3764 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3765 */
3766void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3767 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3768
3769/**
3770 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3771 *
3772 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3773 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3774 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3775 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3776 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3777 *
3778 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3779 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3780 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3781 *
3782 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3783 * can be done concurrently.
3784 */
3785void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3786 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3787
3788/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02003789 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3790 *
3791 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3792 * @seq: new sequence data
3793 *
3794 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3795 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3796 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3797 * ARP requests.
3798 *
3799 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3800 * can be done concurrently.
3801 */
3802void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3803 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3804
3805/**
3806 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3807 *
3808 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3809 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3810 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3811 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3812 * @seq: new sequence data
3813 *
3814 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
3815 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
3816 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
3817 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
3818 *
3819 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3820 * can be done concurrently.
3821 */
3822void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3823 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3824
3825/**
3826 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
3827 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3828 *
3829 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
3830 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
3831 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
3832 *
3833 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
3834 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
3835 */
3836void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3837
3838/**
3839 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
3840 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
3841 * @keyconf: new key data
3842 *
3843 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
3844 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
3845 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
3846 *
3847 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
3848 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
3849 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
3850 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
3851 *
3852 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
3853 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
3854 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
3855 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
3856 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
3857 * of the reconfiguration.
3858 *
3859 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
3860 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
3861 *
3862 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
3863 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
3864 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
3865 * the key that's being replaced.
3866 */
3867struct ieee80211_key_conf *
3868ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3869 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3870
3871/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003872 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
3873 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
3874 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
3875 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
3876 * @gfp: allocation flags
3877 */
3878void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
3879 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
3880
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003881/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003882 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
3883 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3884 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3885 *
3886 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3887 */
3888void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3889
3890/**
3891 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
3892 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3893 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3894 *
3895 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3896 */
3897void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3898
3899/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003900 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
3901 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3902 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3903 *
3904 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003905 *
3906 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003907 */
3908
3909int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3910
3911/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003912 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
3913 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3914 *
3915 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3916 */
3917void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3918
3919/**
3920 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
3921 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3922 *
3923 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3924 */
3925void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3926
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003927/**
3928 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
3929 *
3930 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
3931 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02003932 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
3933 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003934 *
3935 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003936 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003937 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003938void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003939
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003940/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003941 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
3942 *
3943 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
3944 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
3945 *
3946 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3947 */
3948void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3949
3950/**
3951 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
3952 *
3953 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
3954 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
3955 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
3956 * while associating, for instance.
3957 *
3958 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3959 */
3960void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3961
3962/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003963 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
3964 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
3965 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
3966 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
3967 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
3968 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3969 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
3970 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3971 */
3972enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
3973 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
3974 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
3975};
3976
3977/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003978 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003979 *
3980 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3981 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003982 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
3983 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
3984 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003985 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003986 *
3987 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003988 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003989 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003990 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3991 */
3992void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003993 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003994 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003995 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003996 void *data);
3997
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003998/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003999 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4000 *
4001 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4002 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4003 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4004 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004005 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004006 *
4007 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004008 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004009 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4010 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4011 */
4012void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004013 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004014 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4015 u8 *mac,
4016 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4017 void *data);
4018
4019/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004020 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4021 *
4022 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4023 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4024 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4025 *
4026 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4027 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4028 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4029 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4030 */
4031void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4032 u32 iter_flags,
4033 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4034 u8 *mac,
4035 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4036 void *data);
4037
4038/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004039 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4040 *
4041 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4042 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4043 *
4044 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4045 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4046 */
4047void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4048
4049/**
4050 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4051 *
4052 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4053 * workqueue.
4054 *
4055 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4056 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4057 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4058 */
4059void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4061 unsigned long delay);
4062
4063/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004064 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004065 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004066 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304067 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004068 *
4069 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004070 *
4071 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4072 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4073 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4074 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304075int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4076 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004077
4078/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004079 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004080 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004081 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4082 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4083 *
4084 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004085 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4086 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004087 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004088void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004089 u16 tid);
4090
4091/**
4092 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004093 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004094 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004095 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004096 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004097 *
4098 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4099 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4100 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4101 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004102int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004103
4104/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004105 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004106 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004107 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4108 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4109 *
4110 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004111 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4112 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004113 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004114void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004115 u16 tid);
4116
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004117/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004118 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4119 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004120 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004121 * @addr: station's address
4122 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004123 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4124 *
4125 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004126 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4127 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004128struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004129 const u8 *addr);
4130
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004131/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004132 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004133 *
4134 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004135 * @addr: remote station's address
4136 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004137 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004138 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4139 *
4140 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004141 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4142 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004143 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4144 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4145 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4146 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4147 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4148 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4149 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004150 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004151 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004152 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004153struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4154 const u8 *addr,
4155 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004156
4157/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004158 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4159 * @hw: the hardware
4160 * @pubsta: the station
4161 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4162 *
4163 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4164 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4165 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4166 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4167 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4168 *
4169 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4170 * manner.
4171 *
4172 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4173 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4174 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4175 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4176 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4177 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4178 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4179 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4180 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4181 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4182 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4183 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4184 * woke up while blocked or not.
4185 */
4186void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4187 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4188
4189/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004190 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4191 * @pubsta: the station
4192 *
4193 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4194 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4195 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4196 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4197 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004198 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4199 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4200 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4201 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4202 *
4203 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4204 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4205 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4206 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004207 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004208void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004209
4210/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004211 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4212 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4213 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4214 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4215 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4216 *
4217 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4218 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4219 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4220 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4221 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4222 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004223 *
4224 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4225 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4226 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004227 */
4228void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4230 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4231 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4232 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4233 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4234 void *data),
4235 void *iter_data);
4236
4237/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004238 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4239 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4240 * @iter: iterator function
4241 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4242 *
4243 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4244 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4245 * places while calling into the driver.
4246 *
4247 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4248 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4249 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004250 *
4251 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4252 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4253 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4254 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004255 */
4256void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4257 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4258 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4260 void *data),
4261 void *iter_data);
4262
4263/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004264 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4265 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4266 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4267 *
4268 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4269 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4270 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4271 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4272 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004273 * %NULL.
4274 *
4275 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004276 */
4277struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4278 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4279
4280/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004281 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4282 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004283 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004284 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004285 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004286 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004287 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4288 */
4289void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004290
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004291/**
4292 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4293 *
4294 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4295 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004296 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004297 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4298 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004299 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4300 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004301 *
4302 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4303 * without connection recovery attempts.
4304 */
4305void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4306
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004307/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004308 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4309 *
4310 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4311 *
4312 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4313 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4314 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4315 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4316 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4317 *
4318 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4319 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4320 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4321 * disconnect normally later.
4322 *
4323 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4324 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4325 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4326 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4327 */
4328void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4329
4330/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004331 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4332 * rssi threshold triggered
4333 *
4334 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4335 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4336 * @gfp: context flags
4337 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004338 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004339 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4340 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4341 */
4342void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4343 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4344 gfp_t gfp);
4345
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004346/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004347 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4348 *
4349 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4350 */
4351void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4352
4353/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004354 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4355 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4356 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4357 *
4358 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4359 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4360 */
4361void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4362
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004363/**
4364 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4365 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004366 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004367 *
4368 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4369 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4370 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4371 */
4372void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4373 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4374
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004375/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004376 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4377 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4378 */
4379void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4380
4381/**
4382 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4383 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4384 */
4385void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4386
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004387/**
4388 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4389 *
4390 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4391 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4392 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4393 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4394 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4395 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4396 *
4397 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4398 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4399 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4400 */
4401void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4402 const u8 *addr);
4403
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004404/**
4405 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4406 *
4407 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4408 * buffer.
4409 *
4410 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4411 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4412 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4413 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4414 */
4415void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4416
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004417/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004418
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004419/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004420 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004421 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004422 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4423 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4424 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004425 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4426 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004427 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4428 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4429 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4430 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4431 * RTS threshold
4432 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4433 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004434 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004435 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4436 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004437 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004438 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004439 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004440 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004441struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4442 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4443 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4444 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4445 struct sk_buff *skb;
4446 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4447 bool rts, short_preamble;
4448 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004449 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004450 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004451 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004452};
4453
4454struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004455 const char *name;
4456 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004457 void (*free)(void *priv);
4458
4459 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4460 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004461 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004462 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304463 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004464 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004465 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4466 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004467 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4468 void *priv_sta);
4469
4470 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4471 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4472 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004473 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4474 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004475
4476 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4477 struct dentry *dir);
4478 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
4479};
4480
4481static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4482 enum ieee80211_band band,
4483 int index)
4484{
4485 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4486}
4487
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004488/**
4489 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4490 *
4491 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4492 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4493 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4494 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4495 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4496 * not null.
4497 *
4498 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4499 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4500 *
4501 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4502 * that this may be null.
4503 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4504 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4505 */
4506bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4507 void *priv_sta,
4508 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4509
4510
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004511static inline s8
4512rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4513 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4514{
4515 int i;
4516
4517 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4518 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4519 return i;
4520
4521 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004522 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004523
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004524 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004525 return 0;
4526}
4527
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004528static inline
4529bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4530 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4531{
4532 unsigned int i;
4533
4534 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4535 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4536 return true;
4537 return false;
4538}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004539
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004540/**
4541 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4542 *
4543 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4544 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4545 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4546 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4547 *
4548 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4549 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4550 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4551 */
4552int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4553 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4554 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4555
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004556int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4557void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004558
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004559static inline bool
4560conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4561{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004562 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004563}
4564
4565static inline bool
4566conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4567{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004568 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4569 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004570}
4571
4572static inline bool
4573conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4574{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004575 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4576 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004577}
4578
4579static inline bool
4580conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4581{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004582 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004583}
4584
4585static inline bool
4586conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4587{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02004588 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
4589 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
4590 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004591}
4592
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004593static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4594ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4595{
4596 if (p2p) {
4597 switch (type) {
4598 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4599 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4600 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4601 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4602 default:
4603 break;
4604 }
4605 }
4606 return type;
4607}
4608
4609static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4610ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4611{
4612 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4613}
4614
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004615void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4616 int rssi_min_thold,
4617 int rssi_max_thold);
4618
4619void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004620
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004621/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004622 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004623 *
4624 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4625 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004626 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4627 *
4628 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4629 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004630 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004631int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4632
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004633/**
4634 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4635 * @vif: virtual interface
4636 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4637 * @gfp: allocation flags
4638 *
4639 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4640 */
4641void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4642 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4643 gfp_t gfp);
4644
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02004645/**
4646 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
4647 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4648 * @vif: virtual interface
4649 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
4650 * @band: the band to transmit on
4651 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
4652 *
4653 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
4654 */
4655bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4656 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
4657 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
4658
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01004659/**
4660 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
4661 *
4662 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
4663 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
4664 *
4665 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
4666 *
4667 * private:
4668 *
4669 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
4670 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
4671 */
4672struct ieee80211_noa_data {
4673 u32 next_tsf;
4674 bool has_next_tsf;
4675
4676 u8 absent;
4677
4678 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4679 struct {
4680 u32 start;
4681 u32 duration;
4682 u32 interval;
4683 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4684};
4685
4686/**
4687 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
4688 *
4689 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
4690 * @data: NoA tracking data
4691 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4692 *
4693 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
4694 */
4695int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
4696 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4697
4698/**
4699 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
4700 *
4701 * @data: NoA tracking data
4702 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4703 */
4704void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4705
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004706#endif /* MAC80211_H */